blob: 33b87c50a4cfdfe592d6bc72b0ded2b8085f2214 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07008 *
9 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
10 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
11 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
12 */
13
14#ifndef MAC80211_H
15#define MAC80211_H
16
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050017#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070018#include <linux/kernel.h>
19#include <linux/if_ether.h>
20#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070021#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +020023#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070024
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040025/**
26 * DOC: Introduction
27 *
28 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
29 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
30 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
31 * drivers.
32 */
33
34/**
35 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
36 *
37 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070038 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
39 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
40 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010041 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
42 * tasklet function.
43 *
44 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070045 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070046 */
47
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040048/**
49 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070050 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040051 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
52 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
53 */
54
55/**
56 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070057 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040058 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
59 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
60 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
61 * hardware.
62 *
63 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
64 *
65 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
66 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
67 *
68 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
69 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070070 */
71
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020072/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040073 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
74 *
75 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
76 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
77 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
78 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
79 *
80 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
81 * suspend.
82 *
83 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
84 *
85 */
86
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -050087struct device;
88
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040089/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020090 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
91 *
92 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010093 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020094 */
95enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +020096 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010097 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020098};
99
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200100#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
101
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200102/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800103 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
104 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
105 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
106 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
107 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
108 */
109enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
110 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
111 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
112 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
113 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
114};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200115#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800116
117/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400118 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
119 *
120 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100121 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400122 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400123 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200124 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
125 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400126 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100127 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300128 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200129 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400130 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700131struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200132 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100133 u16 cw_min;
134 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200135 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300136 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200137 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700138};
139
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700140struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
141 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
142 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
143 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
144 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
145};
146
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100147/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200148 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100149 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200150 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100151 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200152 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
153 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200154 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200155 */
156enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100157 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200158 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100159 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200160 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200161 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200162};
163
164/**
165 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
166 *
167 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
168 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
169 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100170 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200171 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200172 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
173 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
174 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
175 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100176 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100177 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200178 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
179 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
180 */
181struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100182 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200183 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200184
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200185 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
186
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100187 bool radar_enabled;
188
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100189 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200190};
191
192/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300193 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
194 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
195 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
196 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
197 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
198 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
199 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
200 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
201 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
202 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
203 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
204 * for changes/removal.)
205 */
206enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
207 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
208 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
209};
210
211/**
212 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
213 *
214 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
215 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
216 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
217 * done.
218 *
219 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
220 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
221 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
222 */
223struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
224 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
226 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
227};
228
229/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100230 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
231 *
232 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
233 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
234 *
235 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
236 * also implies a change in the AID.
237 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
238 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300239 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700240 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200241 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200242 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200243 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
244 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
245 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
246 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
247 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
248 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200249 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200250 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300251 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200252 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
253 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200254 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200255 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200256 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300257 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200258 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100259 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
260 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300261 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
262 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100263 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
264 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
265 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100266 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100267 */
268enum ieee80211_bss_change {
269 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
270 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
271 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300272 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200273 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200274 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200275 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200276 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
277 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
278 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200279 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200280 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300281 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200282 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200283 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300284 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200285 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300286 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200287 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100288 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300289 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100290 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100291 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200292
293 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100294};
295
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300296/*
297 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
298 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
299 * filtering will be disabled.
300 */
301#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
302
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100303/**
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700304 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event - RSSI threshold event
305 * An indicator for when RSSI goes below/above a certain threshold.
306 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi crossed the high threshold set by the driver.
307 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi crossed the low threshold set by the driver.
308 */
309enum ieee80211_rssi_event {
310 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
311 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
312};
313
314/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100315 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
316 *
317 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
318 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
319 *
320 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200321 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
322 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530323 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100324 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
325 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200326 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble;
327 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
328 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE hardware flag
329 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP);
330 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
331 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE hardware flag
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100332 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200333 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300334 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200335 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100336 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
337 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
338 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
339 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
340 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.)
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200341 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
342 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100343 * (see @sync_tsf)
344 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
345 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700346 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800347 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200348 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
349 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
350 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300351 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100352 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200353 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
354 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100355 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
356 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100357 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200358 * This field is only valid when the channel type is one of the HT types.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200359 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
360 * implies disabled
361 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300362 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
363 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
364 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
365 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100366 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
367 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
368 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200369 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200370 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
371 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
372 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300373 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
374 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200375 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300376 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
377 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200378 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100379 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100380 */
381struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200382 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100383 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200384 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530385 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100386 u16 aid;
387 /* erp related data */
388 bool use_cts_prot;
389 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300390 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200391 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800392 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700393 u16 beacon_int;
394 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200395 u64 sync_tsf;
396 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100397 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100398 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300399 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100400 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200401 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200402 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
403 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100404 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300405 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100406 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200407 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200408 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300409 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300410 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
411 size_t ssid_len;
412 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200413 int txpower;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100414 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100415};
416
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800417/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200418 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800419 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700420 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800421 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100422 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200423 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
424 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
425 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
426 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
427 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
428 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
429 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
430 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
431 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
432 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
433 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200434 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200435 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
436 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200437 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200438 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
439 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200440 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200441 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200442 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
443 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
444 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
445 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
446 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
447 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
448 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
449 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200450 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
451 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
452 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300453 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
454 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200455 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
456 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
457 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600458 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
459 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
460 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100461 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
462 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
463 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200464 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
465 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200466 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
467 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100468 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
469 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
470 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200471 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
472 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
473 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
474 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100475 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
476 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
477 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100478 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
479 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
480 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200481 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
482 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
483 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400484 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200485 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
486 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100487 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
488 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
489 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
490 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200491 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
492 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
493 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530494 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
495 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
496 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200497 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
498 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
499 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200500 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
501 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530502 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
503 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
504 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200505 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
506 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
507 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530508 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
509 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
510 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
511 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
512 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200513 *
514 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
515 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800516 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200517enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200518 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200519 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
520 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
521 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
522 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
523 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
524 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
525 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
526 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
527 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
528 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
529 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
530 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600531 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100532 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200533 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200534 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100535 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200536 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100537 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100538 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200539 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400540 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200541 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100542 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200543 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530544 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200545 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530546 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200547 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530548 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200549};
550
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200551#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
552
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200553/**
554 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
555 *
556 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
557 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530558 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
559 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200560 *
561 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
562 */
563enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
564 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530565 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200566};
567
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200568/*
569 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
570 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
571 */
572#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
573 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
574 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
575 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
576 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100577 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200578 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200579 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200580
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530581/**
582 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
583 * Rate Control algorithm.
584 *
585 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
586 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
587 *
588 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
589 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
590 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
591 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
592 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100593 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
594 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530595 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
596 * Greenfield mode.
597 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100598 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
599 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
600 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530601 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
602 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
603 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
604 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
605 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200606enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
607 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
608 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
609 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
610
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100611 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200612 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
613 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
614 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
615 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
616 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100617 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
618 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
619 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800620};
621
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200622
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200623/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
624#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200625
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200626/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
627#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
628
629/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200630#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200631
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200632/* maximum number of rate table entries */
633#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
634
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200635/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200636 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200637 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200638 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
639 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200640 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200641 *
642 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
643 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
644 *
645 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
646 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200647 *
648 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
649 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
650 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
651 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
652 * information
653 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
654 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
655 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
656 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
657 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
658 * information should then contain
659 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
660 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
661 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200662 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200663struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
664 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100665 u16 count:5,
666 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000667} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200668
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100669#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
670
671static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
672 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
673{
674 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200675 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
676 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100677}
678
679static inline u8
680ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
681{
682 return rate->idx & 0xF;
683}
684
685static inline u8
686ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
687{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200688 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100689}
690
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200691/**
692 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200693 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200694 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
695 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
696 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
697 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
698 *
699 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200700 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200701 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100702 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700703 * @control: union for control data
704 * @status: union for status data
705 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100706 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700707 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100708 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700709 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200710 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200711 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200712struct ieee80211_tx_info {
713 /* common information */
714 u32 flags;
715 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200716
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200717 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100718
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100719 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100720
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200721 union {
722 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200723 union {
724 /* rate control */
725 struct {
726 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
727 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
728 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200729 u8 use_rts:1;
730 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200731 u8 short_preamble:1;
732 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200733 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200734 };
735 /* only needed before rate control */
736 unsigned long jiffies;
737 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200738 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200739 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
740 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200741 u32 flags;
742 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200743 } control;
744 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200745 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200746 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200747 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100748 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200749 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300750 u16 tx_time;
751 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200752 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200753 struct {
754 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
755 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200756 u8 pad[4];
757
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200758 void *rate_driver_data[
759 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
760 };
761 void *driver_data[
762 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200763 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700764};
765
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300766/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200767 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
768 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200769 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
770 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
771 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200772 *
773 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
774 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
775 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
776 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
777 */
778struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
779 const u8 *ies[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
780 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
781 const u8 *common_ies;
782 size_t common_ie_len;
783};
784
785
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200786static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
787{
788 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
789}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400790
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200791static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
792{
793 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
794}
795
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200796/**
797 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
798 *
799 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
800 *
801 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
802 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
803 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
804 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
805 *
806 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
807 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
808 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
809 */
810static inline void
811ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
812{
813 int i;
814
815 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
816 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
817 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
818 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
819 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
820 /* clear the rate counts */
821 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
822 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
823
824 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200825 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200826 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
827 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
828 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
829}
830
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400831
832/**
833 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
834 *
835 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
836 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
837 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
838 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400839 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
840 * verification has been done by the hardware.
841 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
842 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
843 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400844 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
845 * the frame.
846 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
847 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800848 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100849 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
850 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
851 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800852 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
853 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
854 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200855 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200856 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100857 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200858 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
859 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +0100860 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
861 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +0200862 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
863 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
864 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200865 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
866 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
867 * each A-MPDU
868 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN: driver reports 0-length subframes
869 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN: This is a zero-length subframe, for
870 * monitoring purposes only
871 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
872 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
873 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
874 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
875 * on this subframe
876 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
877 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200878 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200879 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200880 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
881 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200882 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
883 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
884 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
885 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
886 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
887 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
888 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
889 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
890 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +0100891 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
892 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
893 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400894 */
895enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200896 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
897 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
898 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
899 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
900 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
901 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800902 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200903 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
904 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
905 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
906 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
907 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
908 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
909 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
910 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN = BIT(15),
911 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN = BIT(16),
912 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
913 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
914 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
915 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800916 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100917 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200918 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200919 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200920 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
921 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200922 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +0100923 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400924};
925
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200926#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
927
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400928/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200929 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
930 *
931 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
932 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
933 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200934 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +0200935 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200936 */
937enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
938 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergf89903d2015-01-15 16:02:46 +0100939 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
940 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200941};
942
943/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400944 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
945 *
946 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
947 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200948 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200949 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +0900950 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
951 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200952 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
953 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100954 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400955 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200956 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
957 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
958 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200959 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
960 * values were filled.
961 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
962 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400963 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200964 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100965 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
966 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400967 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200968 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +0200969 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200970 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
971 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
972 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400973 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700974struct ieee80211_rx_status {
975 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200976 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200977 u32 ampdu_reference;
978 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200979 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200980 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200981 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100982 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200983 u8 rx_flags;
984 u8 band;
985 u8 antenna;
986 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200987 u8 chains;
988 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200989 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700990};
991
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400992/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +0100993 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
994 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
995 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
996 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
997 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
998 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
999 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1000 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1001 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1002 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1003 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1004 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1005 * @data field.
1006 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1007 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1008 * length
1009 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1010 *
1011 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1012 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1013 * data.
1014 */
1015struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1016 u32 present;
1017 u8 align;
1018 u8 oui[3];
1019 u8 subns;
1020 u8 pad;
1021 u16 len;
1022 u8 data[];
1023} __packed;
1024
1025/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001026 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1027 *
1028 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1029 *
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001030 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1031 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1032 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001033 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1034 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1035 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1036 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1037 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1038 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1039 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001040 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1041 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1042 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1043 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1044 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001045 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1046 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001047 */
1048enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001049 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001050 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001051 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001052 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001053};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001054
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001055
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001056/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001057 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1058 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001059 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001060 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001061 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001062 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001063 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001064 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001065 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001066 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001067 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1068 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001069 */
1070enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001071 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001072 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001073 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001074 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001075 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1076 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1077 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001078 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001079};
1080
1081/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001082 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1083 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001084 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1085 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1086 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1087 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1088 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001089 */
1090enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1091 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1092 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1093 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1094 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1095
1096 /* keep last */
1097 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1098};
1099
1100/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001101 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1102 *
1103 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1104 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001105 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1106 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001107 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001108 * @max_sleep_period: the maximum number of beacon intervals to sleep for
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001109 * before checking the beacon for a TIM bit (managed mode only); this
1110 * value will be only achievable between DTIM frames, the hardware
1111 * needs to check for the multicast traffic bit in DTIM beacons.
1112 * This variable is valid only when the CONF_PS flag is set.
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001113 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1114 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1115 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001116 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1117 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1118 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1119 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001120 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1121 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001122 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001123 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001124 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001125 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001126 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001127 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1128 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001129 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001130 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1131 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001132 *
1133 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1134 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001135 * configured for an HT channel.
1136 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1137 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001138 */
1139struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001140 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001141 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001142 int max_sleep_period;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001143
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001144 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001145 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001146
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001147 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1148
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001149 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001150 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001151 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001152};
1153
1154/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001155 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1156 *
1157 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1158 * operation.
1159 *
1160 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1161 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1162 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1163 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001164 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1165 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001166 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1167 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001168 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001169 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1170 */
1171struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1172 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001173 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001174 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001175 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001176 u8 count;
1177};
1178
1179/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001180 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1181 *
1182 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1183 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001184 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1185 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1186 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1187 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001188 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1189 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1190 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1191 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001192 */
1193enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1194 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001195 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001196 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001197};
1198
1199/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001200 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1201 *
1202 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1203 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1204 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001205 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001206 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1207 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001208 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001209 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1210 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001211 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1212 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1213 * for read access.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001214 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1215 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1216 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1217 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001218 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1219 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001220 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1221 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1222 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1223 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1224 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001225 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001226 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001227 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001228 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1229 * sizeof(void *).
1230 */
1231struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001232 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001233 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001234 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001235 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001236 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001237
1238 u8 cab_queue;
1239 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1240
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001241 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1242
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001243 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001244
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001245#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1246 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1247#endif
1248
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001249 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001250 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001251};
1252
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001253static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1254{
1255#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001256 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001257#endif
1258 return false;
1259}
1260
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001261/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001262 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1263 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1264 *
1265 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1266 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1267 *
1268 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1269 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1270 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1271 */
1272struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1273
1274/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001275 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1276 *
1277 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1278 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1279 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001280 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1281 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001282 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1283 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001284 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1285 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1286 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001287 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1288 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001289 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen1f7d77a2009-01-08 13:32:10 +02001290 * CCMP key if it requires CCMP encryption of management frames (MFP) to
1291 * be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001292 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001293 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001294 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001295 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1296 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1297 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001298 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1299 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1300 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1301 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1302 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1303 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1304 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001305 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1306 * driver for a CCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1307 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001308 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1309 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1310 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001311 */
1312enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001313 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1314 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1315 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1316 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1317 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1318 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1319 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001320 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001321};
1322
1323/**
1324 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1325 *
1326 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1327 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1328 *
1329 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1330 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001331 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001332 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001333 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1334 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1335 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001336 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1337 * data block:
1338 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1339 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1340 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001341 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1342 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001343 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001344struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001345 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001346 u8 icv_len;
1347 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001348 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001349 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001350 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001351 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001352 u8 key[0];
1353};
1354
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001355/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001356 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1357 *
1358 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1359 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1360 *
1361 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1362 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1363 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1364 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1365 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1366 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1367 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1368 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1369 * key_idx value calculation:
1370 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1371 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1372 */
1373struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1374 u32 cipher;
1375 u16 iftype;
1376 u8 hdr_len;
1377 u8 pn_len;
1378 u8 pn_off;
1379 u8 key_idx_off;
1380 u8 key_idx_mask;
1381 u8 key_idx_shift;
1382 u8 mic_len;
1383};
1384
1385/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001386 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1387 *
1388 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1389 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1390 *
1391 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1392 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1393 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001394enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001395 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001396};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001397
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001398/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001399 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1400 *
1401 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1402 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1403 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1404 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1405 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1406 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1407 */
1408enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1409 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1410 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1411 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1412 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1413 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1414 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1415};
1416
1417/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001418 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1419 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1420 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1421 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1422 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1423 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1424 *
1425 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1426 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1427 */
1428enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1429 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1430 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1431 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1432 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1433};
1434
1435/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001436 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1437 *
1438 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001439 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001440 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1441 */
1442struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1443 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1444 struct {
1445 s8 idx;
1446 u8 count;
1447 u8 count_cts;
1448 u8 count_rts;
1449 u16 flags;
1450 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1451};
1452
1453/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001454 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1455 *
1456 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1457 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1458 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1459 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1460 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001461 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001462 *
1463 * @addr: MAC address
1464 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001465 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001466 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1467 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Johannes Berga74a8c82014-07-22 14:50:47 +02001468 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001469 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1470 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001471 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1472 * if wme is supported.
1473 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001474 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001475 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1476 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1477 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1478 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001479 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001480 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001481 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001482 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1483 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001484 */
1485struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001486 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001487 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1488 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001489 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001490 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001491 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001492 u8 uapsd_queues;
1493 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001494 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001495 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001496 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001497 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001498 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001499 bool tdls_initiator;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001500
1501 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001502 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001503};
1504
1505/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001506 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1507 *
1508 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301509 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001510 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001511 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1512 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1513 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001514enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001515 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1516};
1517
1518/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001519 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1520 *
1521 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1522 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1523 */
1524struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1525 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1526};
1527
1528/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001529 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1530 *
1531 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1532 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1533 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1534 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1535 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1536 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001537 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1538 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1539 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1540 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1541 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1542 * algorithm.
1543 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1544 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1545 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1546 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1547 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1548 * CCK frames.
1549 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001550 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1551 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1552 * the FCS at the end.
1553 *
1554 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1555 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1556 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1557 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1558 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1559 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001560 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001561 *
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001562 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE:
1563 * Hardware is not capable of short slot operation on the 2.4 GHz band.
1564 *
1565 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE:
1566 * Hardware is not capable of receiving frames with short preamble on
1567 * the 2.4 GHz band.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001568 *
1569 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1570 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1571 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1572 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1573 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001574 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1575 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1576 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1577 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1578 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001579 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1580 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1581 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301582 *
1583 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1584 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001585 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001586 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1587 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1588 *
1589 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1590 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1591 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1592 *
1593 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1594 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001595 *
1596 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1597 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001598 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301599 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1600 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1601 * the stack.
1602 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001603 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001604 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1605 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001606 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001607 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1608 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1609 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001610 *
1611 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1612 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1613 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1614 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1615 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1616 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001617 *
1618 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1619 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1620 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1621 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1622 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1623 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001624 *
1625 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1626 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1627 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001628 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001629 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1630 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1631 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001632 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001633 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1634 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1635 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1636 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001637 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1638 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1639 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1640 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1641 * supported cipher suites.
1642 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001643 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1644 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1645 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1646 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001647 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001648 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1649 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1650 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001651 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1652 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1653 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001654 *
1655 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1656 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001657 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001658 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1659 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1660 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1661 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001662 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1663 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1664 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1665 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001666 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001667 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1668 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1669 *
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001670 * @IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
1671 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001672 */
1673enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001674 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL = 1<<0,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001675 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS = 1<<1,
1676 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING = 1<<2,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001677 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE = 1<<3,
1678 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE = 1<<4,
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001679 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001680 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM = 1<<6,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001681 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001682 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT = 1<<8,
1683 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION = 1<<9,
1684 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS = 1<<10,
1685 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK = 1<<11,
1686 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS = 1<<12,
1687 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001688 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF = 1<<14,
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001689 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF = 1<<15,
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001690 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL = 1<<16,
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001691 /* free slots */
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301692 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS = 1<<18,
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001693 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR = 1<<19,
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001694 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL = 1<<20,
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001695 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK = 1<<21,
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001696 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS = 1<<22,
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001697 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW = 1<<23,
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001698 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE = 1<<24,
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001699 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF = 1<<25,
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001700 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY = 1<<26,
Felix Fietkau2dfca312013-08-20 19:43:54 +02001701 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES = 1<<27,
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001702 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA = 1<<28,
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001703 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS = 1<<29,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001704 IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS = 1<<30,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001705};
1706
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001707/**
1708 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001709 *
1710 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1711 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1712 *
1713 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1714 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1715 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001716 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1717 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001718 *
1719 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1720 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001721 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1722 * along with this structure.
1723 *
1724 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1725 *
1726 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1727 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1728 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001729 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1730 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001731 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001732 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001733 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001734 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001735 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001736 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001737 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001738 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001739 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1740 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1741 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001742 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1743 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1744 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001745 *
1746 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1747 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001748 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1749 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001750 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1751 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001752 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001753 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1754 * can handle.
1755 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
1756 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001757 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001758 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001759 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
1760 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
1761 * aggregation.
1762 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
1763 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
1764 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001765 *
1766 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
1767 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit, used by the peer as a
1768 * hint to size its reorder buffer.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001769 *
1770 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
1771 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001772 *
1773 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
1774 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
1775 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
1776 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001777 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001778 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
1779 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
1780 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
1781 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001782 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
1783 * from this HW. Note only HW checksum features are currently
1784 * compatible with mac80211. Other feature bits will be rejected.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001785 *
1786 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
1787 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
1788 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
1789 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
1790 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
1791 * neither enabled.
1792 *
1793 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
1794 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
1795 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001796 *
1797 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
1798 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
1799 * supported by HW.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001800 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001801struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001802 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001803 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001804 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001805 void *priv;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001806 u32 flags;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001807 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001808 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001809 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001810 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001811 int chanctx_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001812 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001813 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001814 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001815 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001816 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001817 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001818 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001819 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001820 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001821 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001822 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001823 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001824 u8 uapsd_queues;
1825 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001826 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
1827 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001828};
1829
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001830/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001831 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
1832 *
1833 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
1834 * @req: cfg80211 request.
1835 */
1836struct ieee80211_scan_request {
1837 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
1838
1839 /* Keep last */
1840 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
1841};
1842
1843/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02001844 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
1845 *
1846 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
1847 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
1848 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
1849 * @status: channel-switch response status
1850 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
1851 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
1852 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
1853 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
1854 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
1855 */
1856struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
1857 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1858 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
1859 u8 action_code;
1860 u32 status;
1861 u32 timestamp;
1862 u16 switch_time;
1863 u16 switch_timeout;
1864 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
1865 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
1866};
1867
1868/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001869 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
1870 *
1871 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
1872 *
1873 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
1874 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
1875 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
1876 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
1877 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01001878 *
1879 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001880 */
1881struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
1882
1883/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001884 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
1885 *
1886 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
1887 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
1888 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001889static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
1890{
1891 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
1892}
1893
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001894/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001895 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001896 *
1897 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
1898 * @addr: the address to set
1899 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001900static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
1901{
1902 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
1903}
1904
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001905static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1906ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001907 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001908{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05001909 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001910 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001911 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001912}
1913
1914static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1915ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001916 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001917{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001918 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001919 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001920 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001921}
1922
1923static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1924ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001925 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001926{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001927 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001928 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001929 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001930}
1931
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001932/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01001933 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
1934 * @hw: the hardware
1935 * @skb: the skb
1936 *
1937 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
1938 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
1939 */
1940void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
1941
1942/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001943 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001944 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001945 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
1946 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
1947 *
1948 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
1949 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001950 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
1951 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
1952 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001953 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
1954 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
1955 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001956 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
1957 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
1958 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
1959 *
1960 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
1961 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
1962 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
1963 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
1964 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001965 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
1966 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
1967 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
1968 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
1969 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001970 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
1971 *
1972 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
1973 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
1974 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
1975 * based on the receive flags.
1976 *
1977 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
1978 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
1979 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
1980 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001981 *
1982 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
1983 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
1984 * handler.
1985 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03001986 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001987 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
1988 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001989 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001990 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03001991 *
1992 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
1993 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
1994 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001995 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001996
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001997/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001998 * DOC: Powersave support
1999 *
2000 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2001 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002002 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2003 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2004 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2005 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2006 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2007 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2008 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2009 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002010 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002011 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2012 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2013 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002014 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2015 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002016 *
2017 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2018 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2019 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002020 *
2021 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2022 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2023 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2024 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002025 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2026 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002027 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002028 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002029 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2030 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2031 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2032 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2033 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2034 * periods.
2035 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002036 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002037 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2038 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2039 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2040 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2041 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2042 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2043 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2044 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2045 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2046 *
2047 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002048 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002049 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002050 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2051 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2052 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2053 *
2054 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2055 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002056 */
2057
2058/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002059 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2060 *
2061 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002062 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002063 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2064 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2065 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2066 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2067 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2068 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002069 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2070 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002071 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2072 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2073 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2074 *
2075 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2076 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2077 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2078 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2079 *
2080 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2081 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2082 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2083 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2084 * - a list of information element IDs
2085 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2086 *
2087 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2088 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2089 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2090 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2091 * vendor information elements.
2092 *
2093 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2094 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2095 *
2096 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2097 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2098 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2099 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2100 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2101 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2102 *
2103 *
2104 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2105 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2106 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2107 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2108 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2109 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2110 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2111 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2112 *
2113 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2114 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2115 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002116 */
2117
2118/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002119 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2120 *
2121 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2122 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2123 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2124 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2125 *
2126 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2127 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2128 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2129 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2130 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2131 * hardware flags.
2132 *
2133 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2134 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2135 * turned off otherwise.
2136 *
2137 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2138 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2139 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2140 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2141 */
2142
2143/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002144 * DOC: Frame filtering
2145 *
2146 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2147 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2148 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2149 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2150 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2151 *
2152 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2153 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2154 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2155 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002156 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2157 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2158 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2159 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2160 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2161 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2162 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002163 *
2164 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2165 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2166 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2167 * or dropped.
2168 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002169 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2170 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2171 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2172 * the flag, but not clear it.
2173 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2174 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2175 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2176 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2177 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2178 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2179 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2180 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002181 */
2182
2183/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002184 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2185 *
2186 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2187 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2188 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2189 *
2190 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2191 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2192 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2193 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2194 * the driver code.
2195 *
2196 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2197 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2198 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2199 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2200 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2201 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2202 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2203 *
2204 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2205 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2206 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2207 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2208 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2209 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2210 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2211 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2212 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2213 * @sta_notify callback.
2214 *
2215 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2216 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2217 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2218 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2219 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2220 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2221 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002222 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002223 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2224 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2225 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2226 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2227 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2228 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2229 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002230 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2231 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2232 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002233 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2234 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2235 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2236 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2237 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2238 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2239 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2240 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2241 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2242 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2243 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2244 *
2245 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2246 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2247 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2248 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2249 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2250 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2251 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2252 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2253 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2254 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002255 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002256 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2257 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2258 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2259 *
2260 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2261 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2262 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2263 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2264 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002265 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002266 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2267 *
2268 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2269 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2270 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2271 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002272 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002273 *
2274 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2275 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2276 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2277 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002278 */
2279
2280/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002281 * DOC: HW queue control
2282 *
2283 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2284 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2285 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2286 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2287 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2288 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2289 *
2290 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2291 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2292 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2293 *
2294 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2295 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2296 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2297 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2298 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2299 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2300 * the hardware queue.
2301 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2302 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2303 *
2304 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2305 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2306 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2307 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2308 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2309 *
2310 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2311 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2312 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2313 * off-channel queue: 9
2314 *
2315 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2316 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2317 *
2318 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2319 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2320 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2321 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2322 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2323 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2324 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2325 *
2326 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2327 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2328 *
2329 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2330 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2331 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2332 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2333 */
2334
2335/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002336 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2337 *
2338 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2339 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2340 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2341 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2342 *
2343 * @FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS: promiscuous mode within your BSS,
2344 * think of the BSS as your network segment and then this corresponds
2345 * to the regular ethernet device promiscuous mode.
2346 *
2347 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2348 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2349 * multicast address.
2350 *
2351 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2352 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2353 *
2354 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2355 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2356 *
2357 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2358 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2359 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2360 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2361 * honour this flag if possible.
2362 *
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002363 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll), if PROMISC_IN_BSS
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002364 * is not set then only those addressed to this station.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002365 *
2366 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002367 *
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002368 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames, if PROMISC_IN_BSS is not set then only
2369 * those addressed to this station.
2370 *
2371 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002372 */
2373enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
2374 FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS = 1<<0,
2375 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2376 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2377 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2378 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2379 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2380 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002381 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002382 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002383};
2384
2385/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002386 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2387 *
2388 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2389 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002390 *
2391 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2392 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002393 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002394 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2395 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002396 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2397 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2398 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002399 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002400 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2401 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2402 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2403 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2404 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2405 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2406 * session is gone and removes the station.
2407 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2408 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2409 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2410 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002411 */
2412enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2413 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2414 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002415 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002416 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2417 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2418 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002419 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002420};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002421
2422/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002423 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2424 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002425 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2426 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002427 */
2428enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2429 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002430 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002431};
2432
2433/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002434 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2435 *
2436 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002437 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2438 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2439 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002440 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002441 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2442 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2443 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002444 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2445 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002446 */
2447enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2448 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2449 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002450 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002451 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002452};
2453
2454/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002455 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2456 *
2457 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2458 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2459 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2460 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2461 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2462 *
2463 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2464 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2465 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2466 */
2467enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2468 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2469 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2470};
2471
2472/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002473 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2474 *
2475 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2476 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2477 *
2478 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2479 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2480 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2481 * of wowlan configuration)
2482 */
2483enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2484 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2485 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2486};
2487
2488/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002489 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2490 *
2491 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2492 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2493 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2494 *
2495 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2496 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2497 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002498 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002499 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002500 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002501 *
2502 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2503 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2504 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2505 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2506 * or zero.
2507 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2508 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2509 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002510 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002511 *
2512 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2513 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2514 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2515 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002516 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2517 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002518 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002519 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002520 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2521 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2522 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2523 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2524 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002525 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2526 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2527 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2528 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002529 *
2530 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2531 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2532 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2533 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2534 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2535 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002536 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2537 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2538 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2539 * in suspend().
2540 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002541 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002542 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002543 * and @stop must be implemented.
2544 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2545 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2546 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2547 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2548 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002549 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002550 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002551 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2552 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2553 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2554 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2555 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2556 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002557 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2558 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2559 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2560 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2561 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2562 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2563 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002564 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002565 *
2566 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2567 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002568 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002569 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002570 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002571 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2572 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2573 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2574 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2575 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002576 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2577 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002578 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002579 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2580 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2581 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2582 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002583 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2584 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002585 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002586 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002587 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002588 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002589 *
2590 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002591 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2592 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002593 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002594 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002595 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002596 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002597 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2598 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2599 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002600 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002601 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002602 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2603 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2604 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2605 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2606 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2607 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002608 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2609 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2610 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2611 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002612 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002613 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002614 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2615 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a54b2009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002616 * that power save is disabled.
2617 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2618 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2619 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2620 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2621 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2622 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2623 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002624 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002625 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002626 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2627 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2628 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2629 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2630 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2631 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2632 * The callback can sleep.
2633 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002634 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2635 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2636 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2637 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2638 *
2639 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002640 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002641 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002642 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2643 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02002644 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
2645 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
2646 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002647 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002648 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2649 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2650 * this notification.
2651 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002652 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002653 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2654 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002655 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002656 *
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002657 * @get_tkip_seq: If your device implements TKIP encryption in hardware this
2658 * callback should be provided to read the TKIP transmit IVs (both IV32
2659 * and IV16) for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002660 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002661 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002662 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2663 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2664 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2665 * The callback can sleep.
2666 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002667 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002668 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002669 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002670 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2671 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2672 *
2673 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002674 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2675 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2676 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2677 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2678 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002679 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302680 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2681 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2682 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2683 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2684 *
2685 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2686 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2687 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002688 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002689 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2690 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2691 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002692 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002693 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2694 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2695 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2696 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002697 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2698 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2699 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2700 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2701 * The callback can sleep.
2702 *
2703 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2704 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2705 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2706 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2707 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002708 * The callback can sleep.
2709 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002710 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2711 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2712 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2713 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2714 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2715 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2716 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01002717 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
2718 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
2719 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002720 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01002721 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
2722 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
2723 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
2724 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
2725 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
2726 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
2727 * The callback can sleep.
2728 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002729 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02002730 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002731 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002732 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002733 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002734 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002735 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002736 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002737 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002738 *
2739 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002740 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002741 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002742 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002743 *
2744 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
2745 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
2746 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
2747 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002748 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002749 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002750 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
2751 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
2752 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002753 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002754 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02002755 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002756 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
2757 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
2758 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
2759 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002760 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002761 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002762 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
2763 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02002764 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
2765 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
2766 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
2767 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
2768 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
2769 * - TX: 1.....7
2770 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
2771 * - TX: 8..1...
2772 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
2773 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
2774 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
2775 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
2776 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002777 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02002778 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002779 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07002780 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
2781 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002782 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
2783 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
2784 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002785 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002786 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002787 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
2788 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02002789 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
2790 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
2791 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002792 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002793 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
2794 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002795 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01002796 *
2797 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002798 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
2799 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
2800 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
2801 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02002802 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002803 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002804 *
2805 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
2806 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
2807 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
2808 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002809 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09002810 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
2811 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
2812 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
2813 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
2814 *
2815 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002816 *
2817 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
2818 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
2819 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
2820 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
2821 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
2822 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002823 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002824 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
2825 * must be accepted in this case.
2826 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002827 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
2828 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002829 *
2830 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
2831 *
2832 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302833 *
2834 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
2835 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302836 *
2837 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
2838 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
2839 * The callback can sleep.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002840 * @rssi_callback: Notify driver when the average RSSI goes above/below
2841 * thresholds that were registered previously. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002842 *
2843 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
2844 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
2845 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
2846 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002847 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002848 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
2849 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
2850 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
2851 * more-data bit must always be set.
2852 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
2853 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +02002854 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
2855 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
2856 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2857 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
2858 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
2859 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002860 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
2861 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
2862 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002863 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
2864 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002865 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002866 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002867 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002868 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
2869 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
2870 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002871 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002872 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
2873 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
2874 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2875 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002876 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002877 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002878 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
2879 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
2880 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07002881 *
2882 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
2883 *
2884 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
2885 *
2886 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
2887 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
2888 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02002889 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
2890 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
2891 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
2892 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
2893 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
2894 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
2895 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
2896 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
2897 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
2898 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
2899 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
2900 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002901 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03002902 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
2903 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
2904 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
2905 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
2906 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
2907 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
2908 * 2 * (DTIM period).
2909 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
2910 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002911 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
2912 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
2913 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
2914 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
2915 * channel context with different settings
2916 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
2917 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
2918 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
2919 * unbound from vif.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03002920 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
2921 * another, as specified in the list of
2922 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
2923 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
2924 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002925 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
2926 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
2927 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
2928 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
2929 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
2930 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
2931 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01002932 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002933 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
2934 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
2935 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
2936 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
2937 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01002938 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01002939 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
2940 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
2941 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002942 *
2943 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
2944 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
2945 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002946 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002947 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
2948 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002949 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002950 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002951 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
2952 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03002953 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
2954 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
2955 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
2956 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03002957 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
2958 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
2959 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002960 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02002961 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
2962 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
2963 * channel context is bound before this is called.
2964 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02002965 *
2966 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
2967 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
2968 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02002969 *
2970 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
2971 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02002972 *
2973 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
2974 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
2975 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
2976 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
2977 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
2978 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
2979 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
2980 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
2981 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002982 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
2983 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
2984 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
2985 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
2986 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
2987 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
2988 * the function call.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002989 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002990struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02002991 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2992 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
2993 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002994 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002995 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002996#ifdef CONFIG_PM
2997 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
2998 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02002999 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003000#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003001 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003002 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003003 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3004 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003005 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003006 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003007 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003008 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003009 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3010 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3011 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3012 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003013
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003014 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3015 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3016
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003017 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003018 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003019 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3020 unsigned int changed_flags,
3021 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003022 u64 multicast);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003023 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3024 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003025 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003026 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003027 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003028 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003029 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3030 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3031 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3032 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003033 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3034 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3035 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003036 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3037 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003038 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003039 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003040 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3041 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003042 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3043 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3044 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003045 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003046 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003047 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003048 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3049 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3050 const u8 *mac_addr);
3051 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3052 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003053 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3054 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01003055 void (*get_tkip_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 hw_key_idx,
3056 u32 *iv32, u16 *iv16);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003057 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003058 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003059 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3060 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3061 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3062 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303063#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3064 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3065 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3066 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3067 struct dentry *dir);
3068 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3069 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3070 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3071 struct dentry *dir);
3072#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003073 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003074 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003075 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3076 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3077 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3078 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003079 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3080 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3081 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003082 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3083 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3084 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3085 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003086 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3087 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3088 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003089 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3090 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3091 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3092 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003093 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003094 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003095 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003096 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3097 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3098 u64 tsf);
3099 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003100 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003101 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003102 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003103 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01003104 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
3105 u8 buf_size);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003106 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3107 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003108 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003109 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003110#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003111 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3112 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003113 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3114 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3115 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003116#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003117 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3118 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003119 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003120 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003121 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003122 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3123 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003124
3125 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003126 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003127 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003128 int duration,
3129 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003130 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003131 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3132 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3133 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303134 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303135 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3136 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07003137 void (*rssi_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Emmanuel Grumbach887da912013-01-20 17:32:41 +02003138 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07003139 enum ieee80211_rssi_event rssi_event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003140
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003141 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3142 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3143 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3144 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3145 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003146 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3147 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3148 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3149 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3150 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003151
3152 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3153 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3154 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3155 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3156 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3157 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3158 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3159 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003160
3161 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3162 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003163
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003164 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3165 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3166
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003167 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3168 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3169 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3170 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3171 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3172 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3173 u32 changed);
3174 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3175 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3176 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3177 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3178 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3179 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003180 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3181 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3182 int n_vifs,
3183 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003184
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003185 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3186 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003187
3188#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3189 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3190 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3191 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3192#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003193 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3194 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3195 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003196 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3197 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3198 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003199
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003200 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3201 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3202
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003203 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3204 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003205 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003206 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3207 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003208
3209 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3210 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3211 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3212 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003213 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003214 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3215 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3216 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003217 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3218 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3219 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003220};
3221
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003222/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003223 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3224 *
3225 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3226 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3227 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3228 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3229 * @priv_data_len.
3230 *
3231 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3232 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3233 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3234 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3235 *
3236 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3237 */
3238struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3239 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3240 const char *requested_name);
3241
3242/**
3243 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003244 *
3245 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3246 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3247 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3248 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3249 * @priv_data_len.
3250 *
3251 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3252 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003253 *
3254 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003255 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003256static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003257struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003258 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3259{
3260 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3261}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003262
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003263/**
3264 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3265 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003266 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3267 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3268 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003269 *
3270 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003271 *
3272 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003273 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003274int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3275
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003276/**
3277 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3278 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3279 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3280 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3281 */
3282struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3283 int throughput;
3284 int blink_time;
3285};
3286
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003287/**
3288 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3289 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3290 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3291 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3292 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3293 */
3294enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3295 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3296 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3297 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3298};
3299
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003300#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Joe Perches10dd9b72013-07-31 17:31:37 -07003301char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3302char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3303char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3304char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3305char *__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3306 unsigned int flags,
3307 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3308 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003309#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003310/**
3311 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3312 *
3313 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3314 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3315 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3316 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3317 *
3318 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003319 *
3320 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003321 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003322static inline char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3323{
3324#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3325 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3326#else
3327 return NULL;
3328#endif
3329}
3330
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003331/**
3332 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3333 *
3334 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3335 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3336 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3337 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3338 *
3339 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003340 *
3341 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003342 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003343static inline char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3344{
3345#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3346 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3347#else
3348 return NULL;
3349#endif
3350}
3351
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003352/**
3353 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3354 *
3355 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3356 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3357 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3358 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3359 *
3360 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003361 *
3362 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003363 */
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003364static inline char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3365{
3366#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3367 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3368#else
3369 return NULL;
3370#endif
3371}
3372
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003373/**
3374 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3375 *
3376 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3377 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3378 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3379 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3380 *
3381 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003382 *
3383 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003384 */
3385static inline char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3386{
3387#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3388 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3389#else
3390 return NULL;
3391#endif
3392}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003393
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003394/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003395 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3396 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003397 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003398 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3399 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3400 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003401 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3402 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3403 *
3404 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003405 */
3406static inline char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003407ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003408 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3409 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3410{
3411#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003412 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003413 blink_table_len);
3414#else
3415 return NULL;
3416#endif
3417}
3418
3419/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003420 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3421 *
3422 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3423 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3424 *
3425 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3426 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003427void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3428
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003429/**
3430 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3431 *
3432 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3433 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003434 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003435 *
3436 * @hw: the hardware to free
3437 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003438void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3439
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003440/**
3441 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3442 *
3443 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3444 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3445 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3446 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3447 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3448 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3449 *
3450 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3451 */
3452void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3453
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003454/**
3455 * ieee80211_napi_add - initialize mac80211 NAPI context
3456 * @hw: the hardware to initialize the NAPI context on
3457 * @napi: the NAPI context to initialize
3458 * @napi_dev: dummy NAPI netdevice, here to not waste the space if the
3459 * driver doesn't use NAPI
3460 * @poll: poll function
3461 * @weight: default weight
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003462 *
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003463 * See also netif_napi_add().
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003464 */
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003465void ieee80211_napi_add(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct napi_struct *napi,
3466 struct net_device *napi_dev,
3467 int (*poll)(struct napi_struct *, int),
3468 int weight);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003469
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003470/**
3471 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3472 *
3473 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b3f2010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003474 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3475 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3476 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3477 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003478 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003479 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003480 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3481 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003482 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3483 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003484 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003485 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003486 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003487 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3488 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003489 */
John W. Linville103bf9f2009-08-20 16:34:15 -04003490void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003491
3492/**
3493 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3494 *
3495 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003496 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3497 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003498 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003499 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3500 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003501 *
3502 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3503 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003504 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003505void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003506
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003507/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003508 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3509 *
3510 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3511 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3512 *
3513 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003514 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3515 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003516 *
3517 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3518 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3519 */
3520static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3521 struct sk_buff *skb)
3522{
3523 local_bh_disable();
3524 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3525 local_bh_enable();
3526}
3527
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003528/**
3529 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3530 *
3531 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3532 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3533 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3534 *
3535 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3536 *
3537 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3538 * each other.
3539 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003540 * @sta: currently connected sta
3541 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003542 *
3543 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003544 */
3545int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3546
3547/**
3548 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3549 * (in process context)
3550 *
3551 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3552 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3553 * applies.
3554 *
3555 * @sta: currently connected sta
3556 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003557 *
3558 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003559 */
3560static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3561 bool start)
3562{
3563 int ret;
3564
3565 local_bh_disable();
3566 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3567 local_bh_enable();
3568
3569 return ret;
3570}
3571
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003572/*
3573 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3574 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3575 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003576#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003577
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003578/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003579 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003580 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003581 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3582 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003583 *
3584 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003585 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3586 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003587 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003588 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3589 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3590 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3591 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3592 *
3593 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3594 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3595 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3596 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3597 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3598 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3599 *
3600 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3601 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3602 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3603 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3604 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003605 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003606void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3607 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003608
3609/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003610 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3611 *
3612 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3613 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3614 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3615 *
3616 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3617 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3618 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3619 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3620 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3621 */
3622void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3623 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3624 struct sk_buff *skb,
3625 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3626 int max_rates);
3627
3628/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003629 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3630 *
3631 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3632 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3633 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3634 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003635 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3636 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003637 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003638 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3639 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003640 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003641 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3642 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003643 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003644void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003645 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003646
3647/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01003648 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
3649 *
3650 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
3651 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
3652 * specific skbs.
3653 *
3654 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
3655 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
3656 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
3657 *
3658 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3659 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
3660 * (NULL for multicast packets)
3661 * @info: tx status information
3662 */
3663void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3664 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3665 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
3666
3667/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003668 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3669 *
3670 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3671 *
3672 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3673 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3674 * for a single hardware.
3675 *
3676 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3677 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3678 */
3679static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3680 struct sk_buff *skb)
3681{
3682 local_bh_disable();
3683 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3684 local_bh_enable();
3685}
3686
3687/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003688 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003689 *
3690 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3691 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3692 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003693 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3694 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003695 *
3696 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3697 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003698 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003699void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003700 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003701
3702/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003703 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
3704 *
3705 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
3706 * connected STA.
3707 *
3708 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
3709 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
3710 */
3711void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
3712
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003713#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
3714
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003715/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003716 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
3717 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
3718 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03003719 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
3720 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
3721 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003722 */
3723struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
3724 u16 tim_offset;
3725 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003726
3727 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003728};
3729
3730/**
3731 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
3732 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3733 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3734 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
3735 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
3736 *
3737 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
3738 * obtain the beacon template.
3739 *
3740 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
3741 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003742 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
3743 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003744 *
3745 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
3746 *
3747 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
3748 */
3749struct sk_buff *
3750ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3751 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3752 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
3753
3754/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003755 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
3756 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003757 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003758 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
3759 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3760 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
3761 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
3762 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3763 *
3764 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003765 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003766 *
3767 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3768 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003769 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
3770 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003771 *
3772 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003773 *
3774 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003775 */
3776struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3777 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3778 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
3779
3780/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003781 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
3782 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003783 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003784 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003785 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003786 *
3787 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003788 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003789static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3790 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
3791{
3792 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
3793}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003794
3795/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003796 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
3797 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3798 *
3799 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
3800 * This function is called implicitly when
3801 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
3802 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
3803 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
3804 *
3805 * Return: new csa counter value
3806 */
3807u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3808
3809/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003810 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
3811 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3812 *
3813 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003814 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003815 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
3816 */
3817void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3818
3819/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003820 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003821 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3822 *
3823 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
3824 */
3825bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3826
3827
3828/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003829 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
3830 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3831 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3832 *
3833 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3834 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
3835 *
3836 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003837 *
3838 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003839 */
3840struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3841 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3842
3843/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003844 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
3845 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3846 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3847 *
3848 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
3849 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3850 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
3851 *
3852 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3853 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003854 *
3855 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003856 */
3857struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3858 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3859
3860/**
3861 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
3862 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3863 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3864 *
3865 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
3866 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3867 * BSSID and address is used.
3868 *
3869 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3870 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003871 *
3872 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003873 */
3874struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3875 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3876
3877/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003878 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
3879 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003880 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003881 * @ssid: SSID buffer
3882 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003883 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003884 *
3885 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3886 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003887 *
3888 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003889 */
3890struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003891 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003892 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003893 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003894
3895/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003896 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
3897 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003898 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003899 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
3900 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003901 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003902 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
3903 *
3904 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3905 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3906 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3907 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
3908 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003909void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003910 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003911 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003912 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
3913
3914/**
3915 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
3916 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003917 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003918 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003919 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003920 *
3921 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3922 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3923 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003924 *
3925 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003926 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003927__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3928 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003929 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003930
3931/**
3932 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
3933 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003934 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003935 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
3936 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003937 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003938 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
3939 *
3940 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3941 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3942 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3943 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
3944 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003945void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3946 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003947 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003948 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003949 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
3950
3951/**
3952 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
3953 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003954 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003955 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003956 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003957 *
3958 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3959 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3960 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003961 *
3962 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003963 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003964__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3965 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003966 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003967 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003968
3969/**
3970 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
3971 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003972 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02003973 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003974 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003975 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003976 *
3977 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
3978 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003979 *
3980 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003981 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003982__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3983 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02003984 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003985 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003986 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003987
3988/**
3989 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
3990 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003991 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003992 *
3993 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
3994 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
3995 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
3996 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003997 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
3998 *
3999 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4000 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004001 *
4002 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4003 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4004 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4005 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4006 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4007 * use common code for all beacons.
4008 */
4009struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004010ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004011
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004012/**
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004013 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4014 *
4015 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4016 *
4017 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4018 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4019 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4020 */
4021void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4022 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4023
4024/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004025 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004026 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004027 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4028 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004029 *
4030 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004031 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4032 * with this P1K
4033 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004034 */
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004035static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4036 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4037{
4038 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4039 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4040 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4041
4042 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4043}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004044
4045/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004046 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4047 *
4048 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4049 * and transmitter address.
4050 *
4051 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4052 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4053 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4054 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4055 */
4056void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4057 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4058
4059/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004060 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4061 *
4062 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4063 * in the packet.
4064 *
4065 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4066 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4067 * encrypted with this key
4068 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4069 */
4070void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4071 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004072
4073/**
Assaf Krauss5d0d04e2012-08-01 15:12:48 +03004074 * ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2 - calculate the AES-CMAC sub keys
4075 *
4076 * This function computes the two AES-CMAC sub-keys, based on the
4077 * previously installed master key.
4078 *
4079 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4080 * @k1: a buffer to be filled with the 1st sub-key
4081 * @k2: a buffer to be filled with the 2nd sub-key
4082 */
4083void ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4084 u8 *k1, u8 *k2);
4085
4086/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004087 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
4088 *
4089 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
4090 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4091 * reverse order than in packet)
4092 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4093 * reverse order than in packet)
4094 */
4095struct ieee80211_key_seq {
4096 union {
4097 struct {
4098 u32 iv32;
4099 u16 iv16;
4100 } tkip;
4101 struct {
4102 u8 pn[6];
4103 } ccmp;
4104 struct {
4105 u8 pn[6];
4106 } aes_cmac;
4107 };
4108};
4109
4110/**
4111 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
4112 *
4113 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4114 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4115 *
4116 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
4117 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
4118 * offloaded to the device.
4119 *
4120 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4121 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
4122 * and the stop has been synchronized.
4123 */
4124void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4125 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4126
4127/**
4128 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4129 *
4130 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4131 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
4132 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4133 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4134 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4135 *
4136 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4137 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4138 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4139 *
4140 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4141 * can be done concurrently.
4142 */
4143void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4144 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4145
4146/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004147 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
4148 *
4149 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4150 * @seq: new sequence data
4151 *
4152 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
4153 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
4154 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
4155 * ARP requests.
4156 *
4157 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4158 * can be done concurrently.
4159 */
4160void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4161 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4162
4163/**
4164 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4165 *
4166 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4167 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
4168 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4169 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4170 * @seq: new sequence data
4171 *
4172 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4173 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4174 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4175 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4176 *
4177 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4178 * can be done concurrently.
4179 */
4180void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4181 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4182
4183/**
4184 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4185 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4186 *
4187 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4188 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4189 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4190 *
4191 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4192 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4193 */
4194void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4195
4196/**
4197 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4198 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4199 * @keyconf: new key data
4200 *
4201 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4202 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4203 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4204 *
4205 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4206 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4207 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4208 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4209 *
4210 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4211 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4212 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4213 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4214 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4215 * of the reconfiguration.
4216 *
4217 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4218 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4219 *
4220 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4221 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4222 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4223 * the key that's being replaced.
4224 */
4225struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4226ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4227 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4228
4229/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004230 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4231 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4232 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4233 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4234 * @gfp: allocation flags
4235 */
4236void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4237 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4238
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004239/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004240 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4241 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4242 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4243 *
4244 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4245 */
4246void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4247
4248/**
4249 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4250 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4251 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4252 *
4253 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4254 */
4255void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4256
4257/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004258 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4259 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4260 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4261 *
4262 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004263 *
4264 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004265 */
4266
4267int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4268
4269/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004270 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4271 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4272 *
4273 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4274 */
4275void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4276
4277/**
4278 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4279 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4280 *
4281 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4282 */
4283void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4284
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004285/**
4286 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4287 *
4288 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4289 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004290 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4291 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004292 *
4293 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004294 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004295 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004296void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004297
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004298/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004299 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4300 *
4301 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4302 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4303 *
4304 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4305 */
4306void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4307
4308/**
4309 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4310 *
4311 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4312 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4313 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4314 * while associating, for instance.
4315 *
4316 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4317 */
4318void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4319
4320/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004321 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4322 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4323 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4324 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4325 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4326 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4327 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4328 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4329 */
4330enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4331 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4332 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
4333};
4334
4335/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004336 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004337 *
4338 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4339 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004340 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4341 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4342 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004343 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004344 *
4345 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004346 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004347 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004348 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4349 */
4350void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004351 u32 iter_flags,
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004352 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004353 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004354 void *data);
4355
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004356/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004357 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4358 *
4359 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4360 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4361 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4362 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004363 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004364 *
4365 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004366 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004367 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4368 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4369 */
4370void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004371 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004372 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4373 u8 *mac,
4374 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4375 void *data);
4376
4377/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004378 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4379 *
4380 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4381 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4382 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4383 *
4384 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4385 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4386 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4387 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4388 */
4389void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4390 u32 iter_flags,
4391 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4392 u8 *mac,
4393 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4394 void *data);
4395
4396/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004397 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4398 *
4399 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4400 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4401 * function for them.
4402 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4403 *
4404 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4405 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4406 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4407 */
4408void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4409 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4410 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4411 void *data);
4412/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004413 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4414 *
4415 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4416 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4417 *
4418 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4419 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4420 */
4421void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4422
4423/**
4424 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4425 *
4426 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4427 * workqueue.
4428 *
4429 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4430 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4431 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4432 */
4433void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4434 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4435 unsigned long delay);
4436
4437/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004438 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004439 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004440 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304441 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004442 *
4443 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004444 *
4445 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4446 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4447 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4448 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304449int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4450 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004451
4452/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004453 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004454 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004455 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4456 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4457 *
4458 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004459 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4460 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004461 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004462void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004463 u16 tid);
4464
4465/**
4466 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004467 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004468 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004469 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004470 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004471 *
4472 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4473 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4474 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4475 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004476int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004477
4478/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004479 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004480 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004481 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4482 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4483 *
4484 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004485 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4486 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004487 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004488void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004489 u16 tid);
4490
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004491/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004492 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4493 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004494 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004495 * @addr: station's address
4496 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004497 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4498 *
4499 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004500 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4501 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004502struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004503 const u8 *addr);
4504
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004505/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004506 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004507 *
4508 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004509 * @addr: remote station's address
4510 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004511 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004512 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4513 *
4514 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004515 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4516 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004517 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4518 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4519 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4520 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4521 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4522 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4523 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004524 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004525 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004526 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004527struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4528 const u8 *addr,
4529 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004530
4531/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004532 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4533 * @hw: the hardware
4534 * @pubsta: the station
4535 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4536 *
4537 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4538 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4539 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4540 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4541 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4542 *
4543 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4544 * manner.
4545 *
4546 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4547 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4548 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4549 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4550 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4551 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4552 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4553 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4554 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4555 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4556 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4557 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4558 * woke up while blocked or not.
4559 */
4560void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4561 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4562
4563/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004564 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4565 * @pubsta: the station
4566 *
4567 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4568 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4569 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4570 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4571 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004572 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4573 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4574 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4575 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4576 *
4577 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4578 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4579 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4580 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004581 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004582void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004583
4584/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004585 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4586 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4587 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4588 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4589 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4590 *
4591 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4592 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4593 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4594 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4595 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4596 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004597 *
4598 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4599 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4600 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004601 */
4602void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4603 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4604 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4605 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4606 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4607 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4608 void *data),
4609 void *iter_data);
4610
4611/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004612 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4613 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4614 * @iter: iterator function
4615 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4616 *
4617 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4618 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4619 * places while calling into the driver.
4620 *
4621 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4622 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4623 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004624 *
4625 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4626 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4627 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4628 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004629 */
4630void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4631 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4632 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4633 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4634 void *data),
4635 void *iter_data);
4636
4637/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004638 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4639 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4640 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4641 *
4642 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4643 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4644 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4645 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4646 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004647 * %NULL.
4648 *
4649 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004650 */
4651struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4652 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4653
4654/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004655 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4656 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004657 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004658 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004659 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004660 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004661 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4662 */
4663void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004664
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004665/**
4666 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4667 *
4668 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4669 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004670 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004671 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4672 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01004673 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4674 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004675 *
4676 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4677 * without connection recovery attempts.
4678 */
4679void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4680
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004681/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02004682 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4683 *
4684 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4685 *
4686 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4687 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4688 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4689 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4690 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
4691 *
4692 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
4693 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
4694 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
4695 * disconnect normally later.
4696 *
4697 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
4698 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
4699 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
4700 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
4701 */
4702void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4703
4704/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004705 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
4706 * rssi threshold triggered
4707 *
4708 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4709 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
4710 * @gfp: context flags
4711 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01004712 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004713 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
4714 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
4715 */
4716void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4717 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
4718 gfp_t gfp);
4719
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004720/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01004721 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
4722 *
4723 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4724 * @gfp: context flags
4725 */
4726void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
4727
4728/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01004729 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
4730 *
4731 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4732 */
4733void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4734
4735/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004736 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
4737 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4738 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
4739 *
4740 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
4741 * and wake up the suspended queues.
4742 */
4743void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
4744
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004745/**
4746 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
4747 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02004748 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004749 *
4750 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
4751 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
4752 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
4753 */
4754void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4755 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
4756
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02004757/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01004758 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
4759 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4760 */
4761void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4762
4763/**
4764 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
4765 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4766 */
4767void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4768
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03004769/**
4770 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
4771 *
4772 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
4773 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
4774 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
4775 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
4776 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
4777 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
4778 *
4779 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4780 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
4781 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
4782 */
4783void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
4784 const u8 *addr);
4785
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02004786/**
4787 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
4788 *
4789 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
4790 * buffer.
4791 *
4792 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4793 * @ra: the peer's destination address
4794 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
4795 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
4796 */
4797void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
4798
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02004799/**
4800 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
4801 *
4802 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
4803 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
4804 * reordering.
4805 *
4806 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
4807 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
4808 *
4809 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
4810 * @addr: station mac address
4811 * @tid: the rx tid
4812 */
4813void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4814 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
4815
4816/**
4817 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
4818 *
4819 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
4820 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
4821 * reordering.
4822 *
4823 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
4824 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
4825 *
4826 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
4827 * @addr: station mac address
4828 * @tid: the rx tid
4829 */
4830void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4831 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
4832
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004833/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004834
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004835/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004836 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004837 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004838 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
4839 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
4840 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004841 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
4842 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004843 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
4844 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
4845 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
4846 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
4847 * RTS threshold
4848 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
4849 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004850 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004851 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
4852 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004853 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004854 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004855 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004856 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004857struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
4858 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
4859 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
4860 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
4861 struct sk_buff *skb;
4862 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
4863 bool rts, short_preamble;
4864 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004865 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004866 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004867 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004868};
4869
4870struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004871 const char *name;
4872 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004873 void (*free)(void *priv);
4874
4875 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
4876 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004877 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004878 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05304879 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004880 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02004881 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4882 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004883 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4884 void *priv_sta);
4885
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01004886 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
4887 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4888 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4889 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004890 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4891 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4892 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004893 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4894 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004895
4896 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
4897 struct dentry *dir);
4898 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02004899
4900 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004901};
4902
4903static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4904 enum ieee80211_band band,
4905 int index)
4906{
4907 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
4908}
4909
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07004910/**
4911 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
4912 *
4913 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
4914 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
4915 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
4916 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
4917 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
4918 * not null.
4919 *
4920 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
4921 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
4922 *
4923 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
4924 * that this may be null.
4925 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
4926 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
4927 */
4928bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4929 void *priv_sta,
4930 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
4931
4932
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004933static inline s8
4934rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4935 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4936{
4937 int i;
4938
4939 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4940 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4941 return i;
4942
4943 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004944 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004945
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004946 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004947 return 0;
4948}
4949
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07004950static inline
4951bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4952 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4953{
4954 unsigned int i;
4955
4956 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4957 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4958 return true;
4959 return false;
4960}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004961
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004962/**
4963 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
4964 *
4965 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
4966 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
4967 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
4968 * the most recent rate control module decision.
4969 *
4970 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4971 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
4972 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
4973 */
4974int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4975 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4976 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
4977
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01004978int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
4979void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004980
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004981static inline bool
4982conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4983{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004984 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004985}
4986
4987static inline bool
4988conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4989{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004990 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4991 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004992}
4993
4994static inline bool
4995conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4996{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004997 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4998 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004999}
5000
5001static inline bool
5002conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5003{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005004 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005005}
5006
5007static inline bool
5008conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5009{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005010 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5011 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5012 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005013}
5014
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005015static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5016ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5017{
5018 if (p2p) {
5019 switch (type) {
5020 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5021 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5022 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5023 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5024 default:
5025 break;
5026 }
5027 }
5028 return type;
5029}
5030
5031static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5032ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5033{
5034 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5035}
5036
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005037void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5038 int rssi_min_thold,
5039 int rssi_max_thold);
5040
5041void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005042
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005043/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005044 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005045 *
5046 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5047 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005048 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5049 *
5050 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5051 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005052 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005053int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5054
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005055/**
5056 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5057 * @vif: virtual interface
5058 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5059 * @gfp: allocation flags
5060 *
5061 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5062 */
5063void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5064 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5065 gfp_t gfp);
5066
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005067/**
5068 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5069 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5070 * @vif: virtual interface
5071 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5072 * @band: the band to transmit on
5073 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5074 *
5075 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5076 */
5077bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5078 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5079 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5080
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005081/**
5082 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5083 *
5084 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5085 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5086 *
5087 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5088 *
5089 * private:
5090 *
5091 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5092 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5093 */
5094struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5095 u32 next_tsf;
5096 bool has_next_tsf;
5097
5098 u8 absent;
5099
5100 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5101 struct {
5102 u32 start;
5103 u32 duration;
5104 u32 interval;
5105 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5106};
5107
5108/**
5109 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5110 *
5111 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5112 * @data: NoA tracking data
5113 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5114 *
5115 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5116 */
5117int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5118 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5119
5120/**
5121 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5122 *
5123 * @data: NoA tracking data
5124 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5125 */
5126void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5127
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005128/**
5129 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5130 * @vif: virtual interface
5131 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5132 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5133 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5134 * @gfp: allocation flags
5135 *
5136 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5137 */
5138void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5139 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5140 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005141
5142/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005143 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5144 *
5145 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5146 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5147 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5148 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5149 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5150 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5151 *
5152 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5153 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5154 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5155 *
5156 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5157 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5158 *
5159 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5160 */
5161int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5162
5163/**
5164 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5165 *
5166 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5167 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5168 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5169 *
5170 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5171 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5172 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5173 *
5174 * @sta: the station
5175 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5176 */
5177void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5178
5179/**
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005180 * ieee80211_ie_split - split an IE buffer according to ordering
5181 *
5182 * @ies: the IE buffer
5183 * @ielen: the length of the IE buffer
5184 * @ids: an array with element IDs that are allowed before
5185 * the split
5186 * @n_ids: the size of the element ID array
5187 * @offset: offset where to start splitting in the buffer
5188 *
5189 * This function splits an IE buffer by updating the @offset
5190 * variable to point to the location where the buffer should be
5191 * split.
5192 *
5193 * It assumes that the given IE buffer is well-formed, this
5194 * has to be guaranteed by the caller!
5195 *
5196 * It also assumes that the IEs in the buffer are ordered
5197 * correctly, if not the result of using this function will not
5198 * be ordered correctly either, i.e. it does no reordering.
5199 *
5200 * The function returns the offset where the next part of the
5201 * buffer starts, which may be @ielen if the entire (remainder)
5202 * of the buffer should be used.
5203 */
5204size_t ieee80211_ie_split(const u8 *ies, size_t ielen,
5205 const u8 *ids, int n_ids, size_t offset);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005206#endif /* MAC80211_H */